Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

1 .Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. Finally.

2 .

Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and plumbing fixtures. such as duct. Germany. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. electrical panels. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. electrical. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. and piping. such as mechanical equipment. Add more detailed modelling elements. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. fixtures. Add basic MEP elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. 3 . and plumbing engineering workflows.

When you install the training files as instructed. When you open a training file. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. For example. views. templates. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. you can choose to save your work. On the Contents tab. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. however. Metric: files for users working with metric units. you learn where the training files are located. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. However. and tags. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. After completing each exercise. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . NOTE Depending on your installation. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Create schedules. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Contact your CAD manager for more information. as well as how to open and save them. and sheets to document the project. For example. such as templates and families. is located and accessed in the training files location.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Create detail views. Metric file names have an _m suffix. to provide a richer and more finished design. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. You do not design entire systems. So. annotations. In this exercise. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. your Training folder may be in a different location. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. when you add ductwork. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. and click Save. 8 If you have made changes. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. enter the new file name. 3 In the right pane. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified.rvt and make changes. click ➤ Save As. For File name. and you can open any supported file type. select the folder in which to save the new file. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. verify that Project Files (*. For Files of type. scroll down. if you open settings. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt) is selected. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. Accessing Training Files | 5 . a list of file types displays. For example.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. the Open dialog displays. 4 Click the training file name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and click the Training Files icon. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. double-click Imperial or Metric. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. you are prompted to save the changes. and click Open.rvt. You may close the file with or without saving changes.

6 .

the door retains this relationship to the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. drawings. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. schedules. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. scope. You learn the terminology. quantities. the hierarchy of elements. 2D and 3D view. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the operation of the software is parametric. sections. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. In the Revit MEP model.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. ■ ■ 7 . If the length of the elevation is changed. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. every drawing sheet. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and phases when you need it. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case. the parameter is one of association or connection. and plans. In this case. hence. and schedules required for a building project. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. drawing sheets. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If you move the partition. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.

The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. sprinklers. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. grids. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and electrical panels. sinks. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. boilers. Datum elements help to define project context. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. For example. and 2D detail components. dimensions. sprinklers. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. When you change something. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. Examples include detail lines. ducts. boilers. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sinks. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. ducts. walls and ceilings are hosts. levels. For example. filled regions. and electrical panels. They help to describe or document the design. and keynotes are annotation elements. tags. For example.

Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. schedules. and types. However.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you must be in a section or elevation view. first floor. Project: In Revit MEP. section views. from geometry to construction data. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. top of wall. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. North . you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. or bottom of foundation. you can explicitly control them. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. If you can draw.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. such as roofs. The project file contains all information for the building design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . and so forth). you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and ceilings. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Most often. families. and drawings of the design. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. By using a single project file. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. This information includes components used to design the model. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. floors. programming is not required. In Revit MEP. Often. To place levels. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. views of the project. In other cases. elevation views. for example. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. For example.

and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. For example. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. such as a 30” X 42” title block. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. identical use. However. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. A type can be a specific size of a family. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. With a few clicks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can also display several project views at one time. each in-place family contains only a single type. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Then experiment with them. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. hiding. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. showing. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. System families include ducts. pipes. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. A type can also be a style. Unlike system and standard component families. and wires. Type: Each family can have several types.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To return the panel to the ribbon. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area.

select the tool first. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for running analysis on the current design.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.. tools used for editing existing elements. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and CAD files.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and settings. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and for switching views. architect-specific tools. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. then select what you want to modify. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . project and system parameters. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. data and systems.

displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. provides access to common tools. To keep a panel expanded. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. For example. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. displays frequently used tools. By default. when adding duct.

The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. (Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open.. select a template and create a new drawing. (Export) On the application menu. click.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

family.. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. Camera. (Licensing) close the file. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Print) access product and license information. publish the current project. annotation. click. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. (Publish) print the current drawing.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. provides views including Default 3D. but is not enabled by default.. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. and Walkthrough. annotation..On the application menu. saves a current project. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . to. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. or template file.

Modify. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or the Family Editor. When you are highlighting an element or component. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. This displays the command history in a list. In addition. check the Status Bar. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation.To undo or redo a series of operations. repeat the command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. However. Clipboard. Group. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). workshared components. when you switch to another editing mode. Starting with the most recent command. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. displaying the same information. To show the Status Bar again. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. To hide the Status Bar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. When you are using a command. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view.

Place a Wall. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. for example. When you place an element in a drawing. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. On the Quick Access toolbar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.To cancel or exit the current command. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. To change existing elements to a different type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. click (Modify). select one or more elements of the same category.

Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. After you are familiar with these tasks. 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. In the following steps. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Zoom the view In the tutorials. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.rvt.

use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 5 Click Zoom To Fit.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. on the Navigation bar. 6 Click in the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Modifying the View | 19 . To modify or add snap increments. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. In the drawing area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 9 To display SteeringWheels. NOTE As you zoom in and out. click . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools.

and then using the Zoom tool again. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. ➤ Options.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 14 To exit the wheel. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. press ESC. moving the wheel to the desired location. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. As you move the mouse. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

Small blue dots. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design. These are the drag controls. 2 Enter ZR.HVAC Plan . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Similar controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. called drag controls. After you are familiar with these tasks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . referred to as shape handles. bottoms. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and select the duct. and open Level 2 . display along the ends. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. as shown.

select the first item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the Undo command. Move. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. In this example.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. All changes you make to a project are tracked. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. or press CTRL+Z. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 6 On the Undo menu.

as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. you want to move the duct. Some commands. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. and drag it to the left as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. In this case. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. After selecting the element to move. for example. such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. Press ESC twice. such as the Modify Ducts command. Select Mechanical .Return.End a command Some commands. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 14 Enter VG. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. For example. 13 To end a command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

You can choose from several templates. click Browse. and geometry from the starting template. 27 . such as ducts and pipes. settings. and modify system settings. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. select Project. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. New projects inherit all the families. you learn how to start a project from a template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. such as the default project units and settings. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. 2 In the New Project dialog. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 6 Click OK. You can either select a template from the template library. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. 5 In the New Project dialog. In that case. system families. under Create new.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as coordination review and interference checking. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.rte template. click Training files. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. use copy/monitor. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. the default building levels and standard views. and loadable families. and click Open. create and manage views. link files. under Template file. Finally.

18 In the Project Parameters dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. In the Choose Template dialog. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level 1. for City. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. select School or University. If you want to use a template other than the default. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). create another new project using the Construction template. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Click OK. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. When you select the material. ■ ■ Under Create new. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For Location. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 8 In the drawing area. select Manchester. click (Browse). navigate to Imperial Templates. for Energy Data. 10 Using the same method. ■ For Building Construction. click Edit. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. (Browse). For example. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. NH. under Energy Analysis. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click OK twice. select Project template. and open North. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. you can select it now. click Browse. review the construction materials listed.7 In the Project Browser. Click Cancel. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. To maintain office standards and reduce rework.rte template and click Open.

10 1/2". wiring.rfa and click Open. and 12 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 26 In the right pane. select Identity Data. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Sizes. for 3 1/2". power distribution systems. 4 1/2". For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. Click OK twice. 5 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 3/4". ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 4 1/2". 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Holding CTRL. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. click Wiring. piping. select Views. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. plumbing. for 3 1/2". ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 5 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Pipe Settings. 27 Click OK. 22 In the right pane. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 11 1/2". 25 In the left pane. 33 Click OK. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. and demand factors for electrical systems. click Round. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. For Categories. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. click Rectangular. and fire protection systems. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Duct Settings. 24 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. 23 In the left pane.

Linking Projects In this exercise. select Family and Type. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 5 Click OK. From the Positioning list.Origin to Origin.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. select Sub-Discipline. under Create new. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Template file. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 4 In the New Project dialog.rvt. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. families. 38 Close the file. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. click Browse. and groups that are contained in a project. sheets. click Training. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Sort by. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. For Then by. select View Name. select Auto . You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. For Then by. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. Click Open. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. To enable this coordination. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. In addition. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Associated Level. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and click Open. and select it as the library path. and click OK twice. or families. Load. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and change the name to My Library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. Save. ➤ Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and Import dialogs. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click My Library.11 In the Places dialog. templates. 15 Under Library Name. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click the My Library icon. click (Add Value). and click (Browse).

Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. specify the new location here. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 20 Click ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. custom color files. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. If you work in a large office. click OK. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 22 Select My Library. view the current path. 11 In the Options dialog. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 Under Settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. such as bump maps. 9 In the text editor. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Places. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click Edit. 27 Click OK. This path is determined during installation. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog. and decal image files. If you want to relocate this path. 19 Click Cancel. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 In the text editor. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click the Spelling tab. select Ignore words in uppercase. 21 On the File Locations tab. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms.

You can turn snap settings on and off. 20 Under Settings. 21 Under Personal dictionary. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click Restore Defaults. click File menu ➤ Save. 24 In the Options dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. under Template file. In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap settings. click Close. click Browse. work with snapping turned off. 6 In the Snaps dialog. 23 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and enter 1 . 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. under Dimension Snaps. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.rte. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 18 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Edit. click OK. click the Spelling tab. As you zoom in and out within a view. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click OK. delete sheetmtl-CU.. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 22 In the text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. 19 In the Options dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. you modify snap increments. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ .

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. deselect Chain. For example. 8 In the Snaps dialog. zoom out until it does so. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. This is the increment that you added previously. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 10 On the Options Bar. If you do not have a wheel button. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. such as ZO to zoom out. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. If it does not. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click OK. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and move the cursor to the right. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.7 Under Object Snaps. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . TIP To zoom while sketching. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. enter SM. While sketching. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.

When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints.. 26 Close the file. If you move the cursor along the wall. and delete the value 1’ .14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and the wall edges. 19 Enter SM. it will snap to the endpoints. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and specify the wall endpoint. 22 Move the cursor downward. 25 Click OK. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. with or without saving it. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and move the cursor to the right. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. 43 .

44 .

you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. 45 . and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. duct system and a hydronic piping system. However. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient.autodesk. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. After applying a color scheme to the zones.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. As you create the mechanical system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After finishing each exercise.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. At the end of the tutorial. you first plan the system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. water source heat pump (WSHP). NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. go to http://www. and then you create a plenum level. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you can choose to save your work. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This system consists of a cooling tower. In this lesson. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this exercise. you first configure the linked architectural model. methodology. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.

NOTE When working with a linked file. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. you add a level for plenums. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this section. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. under Constraints.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. select Room Bounding. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Next. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. click to select it. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. not in the MEP training file. 1 In the Project Browser. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. roof.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. and after the linked model highlights. ceilings. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.

6 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Draw panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and click OK. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 16 Press Esc. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). The new level is placed. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template).Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Click Plan View Types. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and enter Level 2 Plenum. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel.MEP. For Offset. enter 8'. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and double-click West . and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and in the Plan View Types dialog. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.

verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE After finishing each exercise. In this exercise. However. for Top. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. In the next exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Default View Template. select MEP . You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. for Level. Under View Depth. right-click Level 2 Plenum. for View Range. For Sub-Discipline. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Edit. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view.Plenum. select Plenum Plan.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you can choose to save your work. In this exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. For Cut plane. you place spaces in areas of the building model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. enter an Offset of 1' 0". For View Classification. and click Apply Default View Template. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 0. and click Properties. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for View Scale. select Design.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under Identity Data. ■ Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Browser. select Level Above (Level 3). Under Extents. and for Offset. and then place spaces in various types of areas.

Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. and ceilings). For Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Horizontal. For Upper Limit.Space Plan is highlighted. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For (Tag Location). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 2 Plenum.rvt. enter 0. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Offset. Placing Spaces | 49 . select New. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. walls. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.

enter 219. ensuring coordination between the files. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 9 Select the space. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.7 Click to place the space. For Name. enter Library. for Number. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.

For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. select Level 3. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. and then click Modify. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. enter 0. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.

Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. and then split the space using a space separation line.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. select Level 3. for Upper Limit.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0. and then press Esc. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and for Offset. 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.

54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 9 In the floor plan. 10 Using the same method. and scroll to the newly placed space. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and press Enter. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. enter Corridor. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which was numbered 219Q. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. as shown. double-click the space name. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. change the space number to 216A. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. In the schedule.7 In the Project Browser. the plan view would have updated with the changes.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Using the method learned previously. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).15 Press Esc twice. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

indicating that it’s the active view. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. you place a space in a chase. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . If necessary. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Space Plan is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.

5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 12 Click in the section view. In the plan view. enter Chase. enter 225PC.4 Press Esc. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. click in the chase area to place the space. On the Options Bar. enter 4'. For Limit Offset. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Interior and Reference. select Roof Level. 6 Enter VG. 10 In the plan view. and then click OK. For Number. For Offset. for Name. Under Identity Data. enter 0. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. for Upper Limit. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. expand Spaces. select Level 3. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select the space. and click Element Properties. for Upper Limit. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 .

17 Type ZF. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Space Plan. and maximize the view. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. select Space Tag With Volume. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.Bounding elements (such as walls. ceilings. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . All spaces in the view are tagged. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. 15 Press Esc. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. and click OK. floors. under Loaded Tags.

indicating that it’s the active view.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.Zoning is highlighted. and verify that All Disciplines is selected.rvt. In this exercise. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Reference. click Training Files. click View ➤ Zones. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. which removes the space from the Default zone. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. After a space is placed in an area. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 .

Using the Edit Zone tab. and Electrical 220 spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the Edit Zone tab displays. 4 In the drawing area. As you do this. under Energy Analysis. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Computer Lab 222. you assign spaces to zones in the building. To display space reference lines. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.5 In the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. and verify the zones in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Instruction 221. under Spaces. you can add or remove a space from the zone. select Occupiable. and click Finish Editing Zone. click Training Files. double-click 121 Cafeteria. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that the space is occupiable. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces to a zone. and modify the zone properties. Next. and a new zone is created. The Zone tool is active. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. click Reference. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information.rvt. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.

■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Click OK.In the System Browser. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you need to activate the zone visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. Instruction. To view the zone in the drawing area. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).

and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .TIP After you finish editing the zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. expand 2 . To display space reference lines.Zoning. and verify the zone in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. enter 2 . In this exercise.Zoning is highlighted. under Identity Data. click Finish Editing Zone. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Area B. indicating that it’s the active view. for Name.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 In the System Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. and click OK. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). under Spaces. 11 Close the System Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. You activated zone visibility in the views. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. click Reference. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.West . 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.

and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. click in the Level 2 . zoom out.5 Click in the Level 1 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. 15 Press Esc. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Select Attached End. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 8 In the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.Zoning floor plan. 9 With the Add Space tool active.

and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. Front. you verify the building. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. double-click Level 1 .The tag only displays in the view where it was placed.Zoning to make it the active view. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information. click the corner where the Top. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.Zoning view.rvt. click Training Files. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . In this exercise. and click OK. space. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. on the ViewCube. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.East. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. for Name Value. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click the zone tag. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. enter Lounge .

click (Isolate). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. verify that Wireframe is selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. and select 109 Lounge. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. Next. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. you isolate the space. Click (Highlight).4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Using the Highlight tool.

and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. select 1_South_Lounge. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). the space information displays for the selected space.■ On the Details tab. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and in the People dialog. For Construction Type. For People. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. For Electrical Loads. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. select Lounge/Recreation. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. scroll down in the left pane. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. select 109 Lounge. and click OK. click . Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and then click OK. click .

cooling air temperature. Next. This indicates the cooling set point. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 12 Using the methods learned previously. the zone information displays for the selected zone.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. For Heating Information. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. roofs. and dehumidification set point. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. and other room-bounding components. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. click (Shading).00 °F : N/A is specified. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and humidification set point. and air changes per hour. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . This indicates the outdoor air per person. floors. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. verify that 74. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. For Cooling Information. heating air temperature. This indicates the heating set point. outdoor air per area.00 °F : 90. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. verify that 70. verify that <Building> is selected.00 °F : N/A is specified.00 °F : 54. Below the list of spaces and zones. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.

For Name. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Under Energy Analysis. for Number. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. open MEP . notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Plenum. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. enter 0. For Offset. Under Energy Analysis. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). select Plenum.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Cancel. select Level 3. Because this is an unoccupied space. enter 212P. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Click OK.

for City. you verified building. click Edit. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . is selected. verify that Manchester. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. double-click Level 2 . 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and select space Plenum 212P. For Postal Code.Space Plan. For Location. and zone information. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. NH. and verify that the space has replaced the void. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. space. On the Place tab. In this exercise. enter 03101. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. under Energy Analysis. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. select School or University. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. for Energy Data. click in the Value field. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis.rvt.

■ In the Type Properties dialog. Select Area per person. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. verify that New Construction is selected. ft.Audio Visual. and click OK. For Building Construction. select Heated and cooled. For Ground Plane. and click OK. enter 200 Btu/h. 8 In the drawing area. For Sensible. and click Element Properties. ■ On the Weather tab. both. for Values. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and click OK. For Latent. select Specified. For Project Phase. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that <Building> is specified. this option adjusts the times automatically. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. Click OK twice. For Export Complexity. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select space Library 219. verify that 1' 0" is specified. For People. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. click in the Value column. and enter 50 sq. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Occupiable is selected. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. right-click. For Condition Type. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). select Specified. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. select Library .When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. under Volume Computations. Under Heat Gain (per Person). In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. If. or neither. for Values. for Building Service. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. In order to select a space. For Space Type. you need to select this option. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Sliver Space Tolerance. a cooling load. click Edit. and then click . enter 150 Btu/h.

If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. You have verified the building information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You should correct the space error in the building model. Select the space associated with the warning. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. There should be no warnings displayed. click Edit. verify that <Building> is specified. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. is specified. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Next. Click OK twice. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. for Values. For Building Service. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and can be modified here. for Values. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. and click to learn the cause for the warning.■ ■ ■ Click OK. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). For Electrical Loads. verify that School or University is selected. click Calculate. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. 12 Click the Details tab. For Building Construction. select Actual. and under Heating Information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Under Power. verify that Manchester. For Location. NH. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . select Actual. select 219 Library. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and click OK. click Information). it should be corrected before you calculate loads.

select 219 Library. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 19 In the drawing area. or make any changes to the model. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and zone information for the building model. 16 After you review the loads report. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . click Training Files. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Energy Analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. space.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 3 In the drawing area. click to the right of the building to place the legend. weather. 21 Click OK. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. space.Space Plan. 15 Review the loads report for project. For Color Scheme. and a loads report displays. 17 In the loads report. or zone information. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. select HVAC Zones.

7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Tonnage Range. The new scheme displays in the view.5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Schemes. and click OK. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. in 1-ton increments.

11 Using the method learned previously. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

more category options are available.Space Fill is the active view. In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select Spaces. for Select available fields from. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . click Training Files. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. select New Construction. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. For Name. you create a schedule for the supply air system project.12 Close the file with or without saving it. For Phase. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Select Schedule building components. In the next exercise. select Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.

select Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. ■ Click Calculated Value. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter Airflow Delta. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Calculated Value dialog. Header. select HVAC. and then click Conditional Format. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. For Then by.■ Under Available fields. select Level. and then click . click (Browse). select Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Fields dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. for Formula. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Level. and Blank line. For Discipline. For Type. and click OK. select Number. For Formula. Select Ascending. In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then select Hidden field. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. enter . Click OK. select Not Between. For Fields.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Select Formula.

Click OK twice. In the Color dialog.■ ■ ■ For Value. right-click to access schedule properties. In the next lesson. verify that Show is highlighted. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Under Conditions to Use. ■ The schedule displays. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. and click OK. In this exercise. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. click the color swatch. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In later exercises. For Background Color. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. select red. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . a view opens that contains the selected space.

78 .

Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After system creation.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. In this lesson. After completing the air systems lesson. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you modify air terminal parameters. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. 79 . you will create supply air systems.

and scroll to space 223. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 3 In the ceiling view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

the hosted elements are updated as well. as shown. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. enter 425 CFM. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Also. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. select the diffuser. and then press Esc to end the command. 17 Move the cursor down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. click Place on Face. type 12. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . verify that Constrain is cleared. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . If the host element is modified or moved. 9 On the Placement panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 13 On the Options Bar.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and select Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. for Flow.

select one of the diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. Next. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar. select each of the 5 supply diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 In the Open dialog. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open. clear Leader. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and then press Esc. 28 On the Placement tab. 22 In the drawing area. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. click Yes.rfa. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. As you place the return diffusers.

32 In the Project Browser. 31 In the alert dialog. and click to select the lines. and click OK. click Yes. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. select one of the return diffusers. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. select Strong Reference. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. under Other. Level. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Reference.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. and click OK. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. 44 Zoom in to space 115. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify that the measured distance is 9'. ■ ■ For the end point. click the Level 1 line.

After creating the logical connection. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . and click View ➤ Systems. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you also use the System Browser to validate systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. When you highlight a space. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. including energy analysis. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Press Esc. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. You then create the logical connection between the system components. the space crossing lines display. indicating that it’s the active view. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. However. right-click the title. click Training Files.

12 In the System Browser. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. On the Options Bar. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Connect Into. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . As you add diffusers to systems. review the Number of Elements. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. and Flow value. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 6 Keep the System Browser open. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 15 Click Cancel. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 11 In the drawing area. System Name. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.

you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 22 Click OK. the air terminals are the children. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. for Mark. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. which updates the name in the System Browser. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. under Mechanical. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.17 Using the method learned previously. Rename the system Next. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 18 Click OK. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. In this exercise. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. under Identity Data. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). In this exercise. 25 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. and the system connects them. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. for System Name.

When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 On the Options Bar. select Network. click Training Files. the Network type provides several solutions. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. which provides various layout tools. select the upper left diffuser. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. A Generate Layout tab displays. for Solution Type. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .HVAC Plan. 4 In the drawing area. and display solution 1. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . In this case.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Also.

select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Offset. enter 9' 10 1/2". 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Flex Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Duct Type. enter 3'. Select Branch. Click OK. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. you’ll get an error in a later step. click Modify. click Settings.Round. For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. enter 9' 10 1/2".7 On the Options Bar. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. as shown.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. For example. or manually modify the duct. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. or offset elevations are incorrect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. as is the elbow itself.11 Click Finish Layout.

highlight a segment of the main duct. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. a disconnection exists. but not all values are used in this view. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. The first time you press Tab. thus it is not part of the system. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. If the entire network does not highlight. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and click OK. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click OK. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. for Values Displayed. select By View. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Using a flow-based color scheme. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. select Duct Color Fill . and click to select it. fittings. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. under Graphics. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Usually. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. for Color Scheme. and equipment. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser.Flow. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Schemes. select the WSHP. 26 Click OK.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and click OK. for Flow. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and press Enter. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. under Mechanical . select one of the diffusers in the system. select Duct Color Fill . 20 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Velocity. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM.Airflow. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change.

select Friction. for Branch Sizing. Select Restrict Height. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Click OK. and drag it to the right.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area.08 in-wg/100ft. Select the upper segment of main duct. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click to select it. click Cancel. Under Constraints. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Only. select Calculated Size Only. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and select 16". 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and enter . highlight a segment of the duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated.

Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). pressure. static pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and pressure loss.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Using this tool. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. also known as the critical path. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. click Training Files. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt.

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . indicating that it’s the active view. and click Draw Duct. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and select the WSHP.HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.

Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip. NOTE When drawing duct. double-click MEP . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Front. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. and click Draw Duct. 14 In the Project Browser. select 9' 10 1/2".3D MEP. click the corner where the Top. for Offset. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 On the ViewCube. 11 On the Options Bar. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. select the top right diffuser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 .

16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. The ductwork is automatically created. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 22 Using the same method. Also. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. it is considered a closed loop. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 19 In the drawing area. in space 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. the color fill indicates the flow value.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Press Esc.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning.

To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. and click to select it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 30 Press Esc twice. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify.

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select a segment of the main duct. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. and click OK. under Mechanical .Airflow. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. 40 Using the same method. under Constraints. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Flow. such as a plenum. and then click OK.

109 . Automatically and manually lay out piping. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. including 2 base mounted pumps. Create return and supply piping systems. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Then. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you place mechanical equipment. on level 3 of the building model.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.

7 On the Options Bar. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Wall faces is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Left Return . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.High Efficiency .2-6 Tons . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. in corridor 328.Horizontal . and select WSHP . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.

12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and in the Type Selector. as shown. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. 10 Select the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and enter 2'. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. verify that the WSHP is still selected. click the top edge of the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. click the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Click OK. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 9'. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Water Flow. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 12 GPM. select the 2 WSHPs. as shown. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Offset. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Under Mechanical.14 Click Modify. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create pipes to physically connect the system components.21 Click Modify. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create the logical connection between the system components.

Unlike logical connections (systems). This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Mech 330). 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . but without a corresponding system. analyses cannot be performed. indicating that it’s the active view. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.rvt. click Training Files. where it is easier to review the information.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . and click View ➤ Piping. You can create pipes to connect system components. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the System Browser. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Creating a Piping System | 115 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.

In the System Browser. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. Therefore. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. As you assign equipment to systems. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. while pressing Ctrl. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Notice that on the Options Bar. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. This display indicates that the system is selected. and the Edit System tool is not active. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. select the 2 WSHPs. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 In the drawing area. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the boiler. Assigning a system component to an existing system.

13 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. 17 On the Options Bar. under Design ➤ HVAC .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.HVAC Plan .Design. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the cooling tower. Creating a Piping System | 117 . for System Name. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. double-click Roof . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.

You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 23 Close the roof plan view. and click OK. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return).22 In the Select Connector dialog. In cooling mode. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. In heating mode. and click Select. and click Expand All. and bypasses the cooling tower. 29 Right-click CHWS. 26 Click Finish Editing System. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 25 Select the boiler. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In.

and click Properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . expand Piping. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. enter 18 GPM. for Water Flow. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click Column Settings. under Mechanical. including the flow rate and size of the component. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 32 In the System Browser. and click OK. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. You also manually modify the layout path as required. you can view several parameters. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.In the System Browser.

Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. click Check None. and click to select it. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . then the Select a System dialog displays. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. you can place the cursor over a system component. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 5 In the Filter dialog. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. When you draw a box to select components. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Mech 330). A system preview displays in red. and click OK.rvt. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. select CHWR. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing.HVAC Plan . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). select Mechanical Equipment. the boiler. press Tab to highlight the system. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Training Files. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 10 Click OK. 9 In the Select a System dialog.

12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Cancel. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. click Settings. select Perimeter. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components. structural beams. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. enter 1' 6''. For Inset. duct. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. It does not reference the architecture. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. to display the path with thinner lines. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. With each Tab. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 17 Optionally. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. and the flow for the other is 12. and press Tab 3 times. 19 In the drawing area. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

23 Under Mechanical. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM).The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK. and click OK. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. under Mechanical. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

you physically close the CHWR loop. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Next. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. click Edit System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. which propagates flow throughout the system. 27 On the System Tools panel.Design. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 28 In the Project Browser. the Number of Elements is now 8.HVAC Plan . the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. Logically. double-click Level 1 . On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view.

extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. as shown. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. access its instance properties. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 35 Using the drag control. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. under Mechanical. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. select a WSHP. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM.

and then click OK. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.40 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWS. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select Perimeter 1 of 5. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. Click Settings. 41 Click OK. For Slope. For Inset. enter 0''/12''. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 1' 6''.

as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. In a later exercise. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). as shown.

Add piping to close the supply loop. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. To create the piping system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. 52 Close the file with or without saving it.50 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Either relocate the system components. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). or manually modify the pipe. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or offset elevations are incorrect. 51 Click Finish Layout. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. select a different layout solution.

rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . As you work in the training file. double-click 3D HVAC Building. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design is highlighted. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and the return pipes are magenta. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Press Delete. as shown. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.

Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.

select the return pipe riser. select the boiler. The connections are automatically created. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 13 In the plan view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and click Draw Pipe. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the boiler is connected to the return piping. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 12 In the 3D view. and the lower one is secondary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click OK. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In.

Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and you select 1 connector. for Offset. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ Move the cursor down. enter 1' .In a plan view. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. enter 2'. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press Enter.7''.

and the appropriate fittings are created. 19 In the plan view. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and click OK. As you place piping runs that are close together. 18 Press Esc twice. as shown. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and select it. select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. and click the minus symbol. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click Draw Pipe. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump. you select the tee fitting. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. right-click the bottom connector. 27 Move the cursor to the right.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 28 Press Esc. 29 If necessary. and when the connector point displays.

and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. for Offset. enter 4'. right-click the discharge connector. 31 On the Options Bar.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown.

138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. type 1'. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe. for Offset. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.37 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. Next.

45 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is .39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 44 In the 3D view. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 40 Click Cancel. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 46 Press Esc. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system.50 or 50% of the Flow. 48 In the plan view. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. the value is 0 GPM. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. select the cooling tower. and click Element Properties. 42 Click OK. for Cooling Water Flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). The flow is being propagated through the piping. When you create the pumps in parallel. Connect the cooling tower Next. right-click. 41 Using the same method. under Mechanical. under Mechanical. 43 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that under Mechanical. and click OK. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown.

■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.

52 Close the file with or without saving it. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower. the water bypasses the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. and is heated by the boiler. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).50 In the 3D View. When the valve is open. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. and close the dialog.

6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. The bypass valve is closed by default. and select Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 143 . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. as shown. 8 Press Esc twice. indicating that it’s the active view.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 4 On the Options Bar.

10 Press Esc. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 12 Select Ball Valve .

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. and click OK. In heating mode. and click Element Properties. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). Adding Valves | 145 .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. right-click. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower).) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . under Mechanical. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.rvt. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. click Training Files. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. Initially. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.22 Using the method you just learned. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 .Size. for Schemes. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.Flow. and click OK.

148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and for Velocity. Click OK. enter 5 FPS. and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 13 Press Esc.25 FT/100ft. for Branch Sizing. Select And.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. and enter 2. select Friction.

Using the System Inspector. Inspecting the System | 149 . and double-click 3D HVAC Building. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.rvt. select a different layout solution. pressure. or manually modify the pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or offset elevations are incorrect. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Either relocate the system components.

An inspection flag reports the section number. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. as required. This information helps you modify the system design. flow. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler.

the Static Pressure is 7. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. you need to validate them. and click OK. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.89 psi. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. for Fluid Temperature. targeting those systems that need attention. and the Pressure Loss is 1.67 psi. inspect Section 6 again. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 9 Using the same method. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 10 Click Finish. as shown. select 90° F. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. In this exercise. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and to size pipe.88 psi. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.

Warnings display. After you assign components to a system. thus assigning the components to a system. 9 Right-click CHWS. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system).HVAC Plan . and click View. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. right-click the Systems titlebar. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. If you place components without assigning them to a system. After you have assigned all components to systems. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.rvt. In the System Browser. double-click Level 1 . and double-click Level 3 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. As you learned when placing components.Design. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. 7 In the System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. 4 In the System Browser. For example. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description.Design. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty.HVAC Plan . click Training Files. and for pipe sizing. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and click Show to view all of the system components. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project.

13 Right-click CHWR. 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise. 12 In the System Browser.Design floor plan. click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. right-click Hydronic Return.HVAC Plan .TIP If you have multiple views open. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and confirm unassigned system components.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Define required lighting.

4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select Copper. enter THHN. For Temperature Rating. ■ ■ For Material. As you place components and create circuits. Click OK. ■ ■ For Factor. select Copper. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . speeding up the design phase. You also add a wiring type. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.04.rvt. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. expand Wiring .Wire Sizes. and demand factors that are applied in the design.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. select 75. distribution systems. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select 90. enter 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring Types. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Select Correction Factor. wiring. For Material. In this exercise you review electrical settings. click (Open). For Temperature.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color.■ ■ For Value. select Red. Click OK three times. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Custom Colors. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.

and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. 167 . you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Use the System Browser to check your design. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Then. Create a panel schedule. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create power loads. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. as you place lighting fixtures. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.

2 In the drawing area. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . for Basic Colors. Click OK.rvt. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.Lighting Color Fill view is open. click Training Files. select the color legend.00 fc. click (Open). for the Spaces Category.00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the Color dialog. select the color for Less Than 20. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Under Scheme Definition. select Orange. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. You can create additional color schemes. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Average Estimated Illumination. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.

5 fc range is satisfied. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click the Level 2 . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.277. which is the lowest value in the specified range. zoom to space Library 219. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update.7 In the Project Browser. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling plan. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. The red field will clear once the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 8 In the Project Browser. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.5 fc range. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.

23 Click OK. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. select Multiple. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the fixtures will move accordingly. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Press ESC to end the command.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 18 Click to place the fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Space Lighting Analysis view.

30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the 3 fixtures. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . click Check None. Click OK. and for Category. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. 36 In the Filter dialog.

174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

select Multiple Alignment.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . Note the changes for the space Library 219. 42 In the drawing area. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align.277V.

43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command. In the next exercise.rvt. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. click Training Files.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.Lighting Plan. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.Lighting Color Fill plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

enter 162. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics. specify 15000.ies and click Open. Under Identity Data. Click OK. select 463T5_S.277V and click OK.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.85. select Xenon and click OK. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. In the Name dialog. for Apparent Load. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . select Luminous Flux. ■ Click Apply. Under Electrical.00 lm. for Type Mark. enter . ■ Click OK twice. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Lamp. enter . ■ Under Photometrics.93. for Ballast Loss Factor. click the value for Initial Color. select T5 [HO]. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Under Photometrics. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Color Preset. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. enter F15. In the Select File dialog. and click OK. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. click the value for Initial Intensity.00 VA.

select Lighting Fixtures. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. Click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and for Category.277V.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 .Press Delete. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. and Receptacles | 183 . zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Junction Boxes. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the next exercise.Press Delete. and receptacles to your design.rvt. junction boxes. click (Open). Placing Switches. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. you add switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i.

277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 7 Click to place the switch.

browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad. Junction Boxes. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.rfa and click Open. and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Select Junction Boxes . The element type Junction Boxes . Placing Switches.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Mark. Click Edit Type. enter JB-1NL. Under Electrical.Offset. NOTE When entering values. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.14 Press ESC to end the command. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. enter 9’0”. 21 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. note the Number of Poles is 1. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. for Level 2 . In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 15 Select the junction box.

Expand Electrical. Placing Switches. 26 In the System Browser. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Junction Boxes. Click OK. 23 In the System Browser. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Space Number. NOTE If necessary. Distribution System. Space Name. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Voltage. Select Load. and Number of Elements. 24 For any column. Select Size. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. right-click and click Column Settings. and Receptacles | 187 . 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and Receptacles | 189 .

move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and Receptacles | 191 . Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.

46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click (Open). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. and work toward the higher voltage. zoom to the space Electrical 220. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open.equipment. 2 In the drawing area.

10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. select 120/208 Wye. select 480/277 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. enter 20. For Panel Name. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the panelboard. enter PP-2B. 7 Press ESC to end the command. for Distribution System.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface: 100A. for Distribution System.Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .

The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. click Check None. and for Category.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Max. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values.Loads. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. For Panel Name. which is the logical connection between the elements. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 20 In the drawing area. Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog. enter 20. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter LP-2B. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Instruction 221.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.28 Press ESC to end the command. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 In the Filter dialog. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Click OK. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. click (Open). click Check None. enter 2. Next you create circuits without showing wire.Loads. Click OK. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. select Wires. and for Category. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . except without wire. for Hot Conductors.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Rating. Distribution System. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 In the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. right-click on the Systems heading. Expand Electrical. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. Voltage. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and then expand circuit 1. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Click OK. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and verify that Load. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and Voltage Drop are selected. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. change the Voltage to 277V. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Click OK. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Close the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.

click below the first one to place it. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 40 Click OK twice. enter FR4. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. click Edit Type.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 47 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Click Yes. Click Tags. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. under Identity Data. Click OK. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. for Type Mark. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard.

Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click Save. Next you create a switch system. select Break. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 56 In the Filter dialog. enter a comma. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. for File Name. click Check None. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. and for Category. For Circuit Number.rfa. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. and click Apply. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 61 Close the file with or without saving it.

click (Open). zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 9 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. enter a. Click OK. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. for Switch ID.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical Lighting. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.

22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.Lighting. for switch ID. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. under Electrical . enter b.

3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Circuits are used for power. click Training Files.26 Close the file with or without saving it. lighting. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. select the PP-2B panel. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. select Electrical Fixtures. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and for Category. click (Open). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. 4 In the Filter dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). click Check None. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Creating Power Loads | 207 . and data systems. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 7 In space Electrical 220. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area.

for Hot Conductors. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and in the drawing area.Loads. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.rfa. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Wiring. and click Element Properties. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 13 Select the wire again. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. Click OK. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. enter 2.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click Open. under Electrical . select Long Wire Tick Mark.

Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 In space Electrical 220. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. select the PP-2B panel. and click to select the circuit.

click the connector of the first receptacle. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222.26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 In the drawing area. in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.

Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Finally. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. zoom to space Electrical 220. Next you balance the loads for your design. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. 3 In the Electrical space.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . click Open. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. select panel LP-2B. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 2 In the drawing area.

6 Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 1-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Phase B 3636 VA. for Rating.3712 VA. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 1-#10. and Phase C . 1-#12. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 14 Close the warning dialog. Notice that the loads on Phase A. enter 30A. Click OK. click Rebalance Loads. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. Scroll down. 1-#12. Under Electrical-Loads.3616 VA). 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit.

Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 17 Close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. and click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.Loads. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 25A. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.rvt. for Rating. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. Next you create a panel schedule. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.Loads. enter 30A. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. click (Open). Select PP-2B. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. under Electrical . click Training Files.15 Select panel PP-2B. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. for Rating. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.

10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Under Header Text. click Edit. click Training Files. enter 3/32. 11 Click OK twice.rvt.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 7 Select the schedule. Under Body Text. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Font Size. for Appearance. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Font. enter 1/8. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. click (Open). for Font Size. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Berlin Sans FB. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open E601 . under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. under Other. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. select Bold and Italic.

There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Checking Your Design | 215 . Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. each with a load of 180VA. Expand Unassigned. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 15 In the dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. select MDP-1. zoom to space Electrical 214. for Panel. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 17 In the drawing area. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Close the details dialog. under Warnings.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. In this lesson. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 219 . 4 In the Name dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Sanitary. click Duplicate. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Design is open.Plumbing Plan . In this exercise. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . type PVC . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. click Training Files. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. right-click PVC . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. in addition to loading existing families. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Vent. Adding a pipe size. In the left pane of the Open dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you create a PVC pipe type.

select Plastic.PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. for Material. under Pipe Types. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. enter 27/32''.0''. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Tee. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Tee Reducing Double Vent . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 15 For System Type. enter -4' .DWV.PVC . click Modify.Sch 40 . for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Cross. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . 25 For Outside. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. and click OK. For Offset. enter 1/2''. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 27 For the new pipe size. select None. Tap. 17 In the left pane. 22 Click New Size. select Sanitary. enter 10°. and click Main. select Sanitary.DWV: Standard. 21 In the right pane. select Tee. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 24 For Inside Diameter. In the Project Browser. click Training Files. enter 5/8''. under Mechanical. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 6 Click OK. select Branch.Sch 40 . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. PVC . click Pipe Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.Sch 40 . 26 Click OK.rfa. 18 For System Type.PVC .Vent is listed. for Nominal. select Tee Vent .DWV: Standard. 13 In the right panel. 10 On the Selection panel. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.5 In the Type Properties dialog.

Create the cold water system. 221 . sanitary piping. and hot and cold water piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent. including plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE To identify a space name and number. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Plumbing Plan . Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. including the men’s room (space Male 107). click Training Files. you add 2 toilets. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 1 urinal. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.

6 gpf. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel.Flush Valve . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .Wall Mounted. 1 wall-mounted urinal.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 5 On the Placement panel.1. as shown. select Public . in the Type Selector. and 3 sinks. under Water Closet . against the left wall. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line.

zoom in closer. and press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture.Wall Hung. under Urinal . above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. (Again.7 Click to place another toilet. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.) 8 Press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.

In placing the fixture. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 12 On the Placement panel. under Floor Drain .Rectangular. 14 Click Modify.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 .2'' Drain. click Place on Face.

and click View ➤ Piping. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and review the components listed under this system.rvt. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. click Training Files. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Default Domestic Cold Water. In this exercise. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and a floor drain. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). a urinal. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary.

and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 8 In the Filter dialog. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . 6 In the plan view. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 2 In the Project Browser. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.

If you deselected the drain. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. for System Name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 13 In the Systems Browser. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Sanitary. You include the bathroom space number in the name. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. click Finish Editing System. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. enter Sanitary 107. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. so the Create Sanitary System is available.

Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . at the midpoint of the detail lines. 16 In the Select a System dialog. as shown. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. and click OK. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. The base is placed. select Sanitary 107. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. a toilet.

The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and modify it to meet project requirements. for Offset. and for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. click Solutions. select 4''. enter -4'-0”. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 27 Click Modify. and click Settings. select Intersections. 24 In the left pane. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. select Branch. enter -1' 0''. for Diameter. select Main. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. You accept this suggested solution. and click OK. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 25 On the Options Bar. for Slope. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The default settings are automatically modified.19 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. 21 On Options Bar. 23 For Offset. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Solution Type.

select the vertical route path segments. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl.

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel.

234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it. When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.

38 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.

in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan .rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Rectangular. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. select 22''x22'' .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). under Lavatory . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Element panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 5 On the Placement panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and verify that Level 1 .Public.Design is open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.

enter 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 8 Select the sink. For example. select Multiple. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. On the Options Bar. TIP When entering dimensions.

12 In the drawing area. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and press Enter to create the third sink. click Finish Editing System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Press Esc. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 16 On the Edit System panel. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

double-click 3D Plumbing. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.In the System Browser. and click Draw Pipe. as shown. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 19 In the 3D view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . with the tee fitting selected. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Select the fitting. 21 Select the tee.Design ➤ 3D Views. 22 In the plan view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 27 Click Modify. and click Apply. In this example.6''. press Spacebar. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click to draw the pipe. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. for Slope. When you press the Spacebar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Offset. enter 2' .

31 Click Modify.DWV. select Standard. 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe. and when the vertical center line displays. under Wye 45 Deg Double .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.Sch 40 .PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. click to place the fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 .

34 Press Esc. zoom in to the double wye fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 1'. enter 6''. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. 37 Select the fitting. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . on the Options Bar. right-click the right connector. for Offset. In the next steps. and click Draw Pipe. you add pipe segments to the double wye.33 With the fitting selected.

41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .

right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. enter 6''. 49 Using the same method. and press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 46 In the section view. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 47 Move the cursor down. 48 Click Modify.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. press Spacebar.

54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method. under Trap P . 53 Using the same method.Sch 40 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 52 In the plan view. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 51 In the Type Selector. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. select the P-Trap on the left. 55 In the 3D view.DWV. select Standard.

right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. 58 Using the same method. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.. select the left P-Trap. and press Enter. Click in the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. enter 6''. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. connect the right sink to the double wye. Select the double wye pipe on the left.

select PVC Sanitary.■ In the 3D view. In the Type Selector. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . while pressing Ctrl. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the section of pipe you just drew. as shown. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. adjusting the sanitary stack. and verify the slope. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. for Slope. 62 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Finish. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 63 On the Slope Editor panel. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

as shown. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Pipe. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Plumbing Plan .Overall. 3 In the Section view.Design.PVC .Floor level line. 9 In the Type Selector. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 Select the tee. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . right-click the top connector. click Modify. and click to draw the pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right.Design. 10 In the 3D view.Sch 40 .DWV. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 7 On the Selection panel. select the vertical stack. and click the intersection to place the fitting. select Standard. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .

14 On the Options Bar. under Plug . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe.DWV. 15 Press Esc. enter 1'-0”. as shown. 18 In the plan view. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard.11 Click Modify. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 12 Select the fitting. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once. 17 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 .PVC . for Offset.

20 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.19 Click Modify.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

select Branch. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 10 Click OK. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. 4 In the right pane. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Overall. select Pipe Types: Water. expand Unassigned. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. and for System Type. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. select Branch. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and sinks. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Domestic Hot Water. For Offset. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing . for System Type. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Type. enter 9' 3''. 6 In the left pane. double-click 3D Plumbing . 14 In the System Browser. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.Design ➤ 3D Views. 17 In the Filter dialog. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and click OK. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types: Water.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 7 In the left pane. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Main. urinal. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. if necessary. select Domestic Cold Water. click Check None. 9 In the left pane. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and click Main. minimize the Sanitary system. select Plumbing Fixtures. select Domestic Hot Water. verify that the value is 9' 0''. For Offset. 15 In the plan view.

24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . For Flow Conversion Method. 19 On the System Tools panel. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. In the System Browser. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 21 On the Edit System panel. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. enter DCW 107. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Notice that the water main displays in blue.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. click Edit System. click Finish Editing System.

enter 7''. For Slope. 37 On the Options Bar. select the sink above the urinal. 35 In the Type Selector.25 Using the same method. as shown. enter 0”/12”. 31 On the Options Bar. under Pipe Types. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. select Water. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. at the intersection of the water main pipe. and press Enter. and click the connector. and click to place the pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 28 In the Type Selector. enter 10'. click to the left of the urinal. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 30 In the plan view. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. connect the second toilet. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected.2 7/8''. For Offset. right-click the top DCW connector. enter 3' . and press Enter. for Offset. 34 In the plan view. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. 33 Click Modify. select 3/4''. 32 Move the cursor to the right. enter 4'0”. for Offset. as shown.

40 Click Modify. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click OK. and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. 41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. you create the hot water system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. add a water heater.44 Using the same method. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. select the 3 sinks.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . 6 In the plan view. expand the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. while pressing Ctrl. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.rvt. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.

Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 10 In the System Browser. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector. select 0. 15 In the System Browser. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 14 Click Modify. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. you edit the system to add equipment. under Water Heater . Default Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder. When designing systems. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.6 Gallon. 13 In the plan view. verify that DCW 107 is selected. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.Tankless. Default Domestic Cold Water. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. and click OK. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. In later steps. and click Edit System. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. for System Name.

21 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. enter 10’. and select Draw Pipe.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. enter 1' 6''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 24 Move the cursor up. right-click the middle left connector. 19 Select the water heater. 22 In the Type Selector. click Finish Editing System. select the water heater. and press Enter. for Offset. 23 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. and on the Edit System panel. Offset: 4' 6''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. Slope: 0''/12''.

select 4'-6''. enter 1' 6''. click Finish Editing System. and click Draw Pipe. 33 On the Edit System panel. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 9' 0''. and press Enter. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). enter 1''.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and for Offset. select Domestic Hot Water 107. for Offset. select a sink. 37 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 30 On the System Tools panel. 35 On the Options Bar. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Edit System. as shown. 36 Move the cursor down. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and in the System Selector.

as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 41 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. 42 Click Modify. for Offset.39 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. enter 1’.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In this lesson. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 2 Right-click Standard.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. and click Duplicate. After finishing each exercise. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. click Training Files. In this tutorial. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.rvt. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.autodesk. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. 267 . you can choose to save your work. You create a new pipe type.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.

This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 9 Click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. verify that 9' 0" is selected. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. select Fire Protection Wet. select Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. For Offset. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Main. you create project parameters and work with schedules. For Pipe Type. or architectural components. verify that 9' 0" is specified. For Pipe Type. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. For System Type. and then click OK.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). duct. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. structural beams. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . However. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. For System Type. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. select Carbon Steel. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. click Rename. for Material. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Next. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. For Offset. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 6 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. and click Properties. under Mechanical.

3 In the Project Parameters dialog. right-click. select Fire Protection. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the drawing area. under Fire Protection.Design is highlighted. select Spaces. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Click OK twice. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Add. for Name. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. enter Sprinkler Zone. For Group parameter under. click Training Files. select the upper half of the building. the space crossing lines display. and click Element Properties.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select space Instruction 221 as shown. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. Under Categories. and then click OK. enter Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. 8 Using a crossing window.

10 In the Filter dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including a calculated value parameter. for Sprinkler Zone. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.rvt. verify that only Spaces are selected. 13 Using the same method. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone. enter Zone 2. to which you add various parameters. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then access instance properties. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. under Fire Protection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Key name. and on the ribbon. enter Maximum Spacing. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Maximum Spacing. select To the nearest 1'. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.Design is highlighted. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. click the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Using the same method. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Feet and fractional inches. For Group parameter under. 7 Click OK. select Fire Protection. 11 Click OK twice. The schedule displays. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Obstructed-Combustible. For Type of Parameter. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 10 In the Format dialog. 9 On the Formatting tab. select Spaces. In the Maximum Spacing column.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click OK. For Rounding. Select Schedule keys. enter Light. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 14 Select the new header. click Add Parameter. select Length. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Fire Protection Plan . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. and click Field Format. enter 15. For Units. For Name.

add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 16 Using the same method. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. select Spaces. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Click OK. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. enter 130. Unobstructed Ordinary. under Available fields. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and press Enter.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.

select Fixed. For Rounding. For Then by. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . under Other. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. For Discipline. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Select Header and Blank line. for Sorting/Grouping. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Enter the formula operator / after Area. select Minimum Sprinklers. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). select 0 decimal place. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. click Edit. select Level. Click OK. and click OK. click . The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Area. For Formula. for Sort by. 19 Click the Formatting tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In the Fields dialog. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Type. select Sprinkler Zone. and click View Properties. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Common. 20 On the Formatting tab. For Units.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. 22 Click OK twice. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Number.

and then click Field Format. and then select Hidden field. 30 Click OK twice. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Level. 26 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. 27 In the drawing area. for Filter by. and select Totals only. For Then by (second instance). ■ In the Format dialog. Under Field formatting. for Filter. select Sprinkler Zone. verify that Use default settings is selected. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Level equals Level 2. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Fields. select Number. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Grand totals. click Edit. select Hidden field. right-click the schedule. At the bottom of the dialog.

and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. select Embedded Schedule. delete the word Maximum. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. for Available fields. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. select Count. and select Totals only. On the Formatting tab. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals. System Name. click Edit. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . double-click Type. For Category. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and Count. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Calculate totals. select Sprinklers. for Fields. Under Field formatting. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. and click View Properties. under Other. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.

but their values are not determined. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 48 In the floor plan. select Light. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 Click OK. 41 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed. and access the instance properties. under Identity Data. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select space 221 Instruction. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. 44 In the schedule. for Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Unobstructed. and click OK. 46 With the space still selected. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. As a result. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. double-click FP . 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. select Ordinary.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. methodology.autodesk. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. 279 . you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. By following the recommended workflow. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. As you create the system.rvt. At the end of this tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . However. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. If the tutorial training files are not present. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and double-click Level 2 . After finishing each exercise. As you place the sprinklers. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will understand the process. click Training Files.

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. After placing the initial sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When there is a small misalignment. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. When this happens. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.

9 In space Instruction 202. and select Sprinkler . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 10 Press Esc twice. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and click to place 3 sprinklers. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. while pressing Ctrl.Pendent . 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. select the sprinklers that you placed. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. as shown.

Next. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Also. verify that Constrain is cleared. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. as shown. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection.

Notice that the schedule updates. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 18 Type WT. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. under Constraints.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 10' 6". you adjust the offset. and 200C). open Design ➤ FP . Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. for Offset. move the cursor to the right. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 25 Click OK. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Next. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point.FP_Ceiling view. For Number. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and press Enter.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 200B. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. specify a vertical offset. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. 19 In the floor plan. 29 Press Esc.Design. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. enter 11. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.Fire Protection Plan . and click Element Properties. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 17 In the Project Browser. enter 14' 6". and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. This number is determined in the schedule.

This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. indicating that it’s the active view. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.Fire Protection Plan . In the next exercise. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and with piping (physical connection).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Unlike logical connections (systems). 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. After creating the logical connection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.Design is highlighted. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. However. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.rvt. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.

5 Right-click the header. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. As you assign sprinklers to systems. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. named Fire Protection Wet. within the Piping Systems folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. as shown. click View ➤ Systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. and select Piping. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. In the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and on the Options Bar. The Generate Layout tools are activated.Wet is selected. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 11 With the system still selected. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. press Tab. select an initial piping layout. 15 In the drawing area. place the cursor over a sprinkler. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. and number of elements in the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and click Select. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. For Offset. 13 In the System Browser. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. In the left pane. 14 Click Finish Editing System. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. for System Name. enter FP Wet_Zone2. system equipment. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and select the system. verify that Main is selected. and a piping layout preview displays. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. Next. For Pipe Type. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. indicating the logical connection. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. 19 Click OK. providing system editing tools. 12 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. The Edit Piping System panel displays. click Settings. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. select Branch. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.

and green represents branch lines). (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 .20 On the Generate Layout panel. In general. 22 On the Options Bar. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. enter -12' 0". click Place Base. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. as shown. verify that Network is selected. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. for Diameter. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. When the layout is finished. click Solutions. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). select 2". 23 For Offset. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

click Modify. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 29 Click Finish Layout.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. On the Generate Layout panel.

View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 32 If necessary. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and then you create piping to physically connect them. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. Either relocate the system components. Next.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. or manually modify the pipe. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. the Connect Into tool. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. select a different layout solution. and various manual pipe creation tools.

1 In the Project Browser. 3 If necessary.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click Training Files. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Design is highlighted. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom in.

verify that Solutions is selected. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. 8 In the corridor. click Add To System. or a system component to display system tools. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. click Finish Editing System. and pipe or duct is created. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected. and select solution 5. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 9 On the Edit System panel. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. radiators. 13 Click Finish Layout. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 14 Close the System Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. air terminals. for Solution Type. you can select the pipe or duct. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. mechanical equipment.

and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 24 In the Piping Plan. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 28 In the drawing area.20 Open Design ➤ FP . select 9'. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and then tile the views. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. for Offset. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 25 Select the sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 29 Using the same method. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. right-click.

33 Close the file with or without saving it.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.

Design is highlighted.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. for Scale.Fire Protection Plan . 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . ■ 6 Press Esc. select 1/4" = 1'-0". You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select 4". The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

23 Close the 3D view. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 .22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select 1 1/4". Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. as shown. for Diameter. 24 In the drawing area. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 26 Using the same method. and maximize the floor plan. 25 On the Options Bar. and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified.

The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 28 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. For additional practice. In this exercise. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. In this tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you created a wet fire protection system. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click Rename. and click Properties. right-click Level 1. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. under Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. dependent views. and click OK.rvt. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 307 . and apply a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . If the view included detail graphics. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. and view references. 2 In the Project Browser. matchlines. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. click Training Files.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. as shown. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. more focused. 10 In the drawing area.rvt. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 4 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. create dependent views for areas B and C. click Training Files. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 9 Click OK. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. views and put them on the sheet. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. and then press Esc. and click Rename.

select 11. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 19 In the drawing area. In the Color dialog./ ---). For Line Pattern. for Target view. click the current value. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. on the Options Bar. 13 Press Esc twice. 20 Select the upper view reference and. and click OK. and then press Esc. select black. For Line Weight. 14 Click Finish Matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 21 Using the same method. select Double Dash 5/8".

23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. as shown. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 25 Using the same method. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. and zoom to each of the view references.

You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently.Domestic Water. for View Name. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The section crop lines no longer display. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Project Browser. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . 2 Zoom in. 4 In the Project Browser.29 Close the file with or without saving it. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. click Training Files. select Documentation. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. right-click Plumbing Isometric . right-click 3D Plumbing. and click Apply Default View Template. For Default View Template. and click to select it. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and click Properties. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the section box. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Plumbing Isometric. select Plumbing. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. For Sub-Discipline. Under Graphics. for View Classification. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

and then click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Click Apply. press Tab 3 times. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. For Pattern. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. 12 Using the same method. select Dash.9 Right-click. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select 3. and click to select it. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

as shown). press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click.

15 Press Esc. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar.Domestic Water view with detailing. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements.Sanitary Waste. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. press Tab 3 times. Right-click. In the drawing area. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and click to select it. On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 18 Using methods learned previously.

For Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . and then place the callout view on a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. select To the nearest 1/8". 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. for Rounding. click on the Format value. verify that Common is selected. 21 Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to place the spot slope annotation.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. as shown. 25 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. In the Format dialog. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. select 1/4"=1'-0''. click Training Files. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). for Scale. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i.

using the same method. 13 In the Project Browser. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Click OK. drag it to the sheet. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. select 5.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. under Sheets (all). ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 317 . double-click M601 . ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. For Title on Sheet. Click OK. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . For Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter WSHP PART PLAN. and select the viewport.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. right-click the callout view. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.

Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.

and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click the detail view. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and click OK. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. under Names. enter Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.

linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. ■ work with model-based components. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. symbols.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. click Training Files. 8 With the text still selected. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).Creating Annotations In this exercise. as shown. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rvt.

9 Press Esc twice. verify that Leader is cleared. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 16 In the drawing area. a segment of round duct. as shown. Creating Annotations | 323 . and then click Right Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and a segment of rectangular duct. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. select a supply diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

and click Open.rfa.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. clear Leader. If necessary.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. for Ducts. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. click Load. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. 24 On the Options Bar. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the Load Family dialog. and click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Modify. under Category.

29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown. and then press Esc. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 32 In the drawing area. 26 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. Creating Annotations | 325 . select Horizontal. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 31 On the Options Bar. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the drawing area.

as shown. select Free End. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and all elements of that type are affected. lay out. select the last tag placed. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 37 In the drawing area. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and click OK. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. not simply an instance property. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and lock lighting fixtures.36 Press Esc twice. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 40 Using the method learned previously. for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. select Dot Open 1/16". That’s because you changed a type property.

4 Using the Move Witness Line control. select the dimension line. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 12 Press Esc. and then select the interior face of the wall. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . On the Options Bar. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted.

13 Using the same method. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 16 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 329 . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. Because the dimensions are locked. enter 8'. annotation symbols. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.3 1/2"). and notes. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and press Enter. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and offset them 8' from the wall. 19 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise. click the 3 interior locks on the line. linework.

6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Scale. Click OK. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter Diffuser Legend. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select Floor Plan. ■ 9 In the drawing area.rvt. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 10 Using the same method. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. For View. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. click below the title to place the diffuser. 5 Click in the drawing area.8 Neck. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click Training Files. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 1/4" = 1' -0".

14 In the drawing area. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser.

19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 21 Press Esc.DROP and its text note. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 24 Select the component’s break line.RISE symbol for the copy start point. and then press Esc.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.MECHANICAL LEGEND. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. enter E. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . Creating a Legend | 333 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

detail groups.Detailing 15 In this lesson. click Training Files.113 East elevation view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting view using detail components. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. and text. 335 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A detail callout that references another view. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.

and then modify and align the views. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Next. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 5 In the drawing area. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. select each of the 2 panelboards. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . clear Leader. place Power Riser . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. 4 On the Options Bar.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. 7 Drag the Power Riser . and click to place it. 8 Using the same method.

for Title on Sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. select the 113 North view. under Identity Data. and click OK. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Activate View. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. giving the appearance of a single view. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc. 13 Right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Deactivate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 .

Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. as shown. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. right-click. and click Activate View. 22 Press Esc. 21 Using the drag control. In the next exercise. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you add wiring to the diagram. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 19 Select the Level 1 line.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram.

4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and click OK. As you draw. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. enter Electrical Power. click New. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. expand Lines. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. In the New Subcategory dialog. In the Line Styles dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . verify that Chain is selected. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and then click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. for Line Weight.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. click Training Files. 2 Close the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. notice that there are no snaps active. Under Modify Subcategories. for Name.113 North view. select 6.rvt. as shown. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB).

for Offset. 13 On the Options Bar.10 Press Esc. as shown. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. enter 1/8". 11 Using the same method.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 28 Click above the cap. 29 Click Modify. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length. 40 Press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . for Offset. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.36 Press Esc. and press Enter. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. enter 0 0.5. enter 3/32". Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. 47 In the drawing area. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 0 0.125. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and press Enter.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. click on the length dimension value. you can ensure that they stay together. Using the same method. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and then press Esc. and click OK. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0.25. enter Ground. 50 With the group selected. Press Esc. select all 3 lines. 46 In the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail. for Name.

54 Select the group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. TP-2B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 52 Select the detail group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

for Name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.rvt. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In later exercises. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 2 Right-click the copy. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. and click OK. click Training Files. and click Rename. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and will place it on sheet E01. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

click Home.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge. Back. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then click the corner where the Top. 7 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then press Esc.

13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Names. Click OK. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click Apply View Template. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. select 3D HVAC Iso. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Walkthroughs. select 3D Views. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.

19 Complete the text labels. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . and click to specify the second leader point. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Move the cursor down and to the left. as shown.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Typical. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. (Right).

select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. and under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. under Extents. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing .To rotate and reposition a text label. 25 Click OK. and then click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible.

select the isometric view. Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . For Scale. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select 3" = 1'-0". 3 In the Project Browser. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). right-click the view name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.29 In the drawing area.rvt. and click Properties. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place a detail component. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

as shown. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. For View Classification. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. for Sub-Discipline. click the point at the top of the drain. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as the rectangle start point. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Documentation. 13 In the drawing area. select Plumbing. 9 Zoom in to the component.

P. 21 In the drawing area. for Type. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. Concrete. select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc.I. 22 Click Modify. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 20 Select 1. (Line). Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.

34 Press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. select Multiple. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click to select them. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 On the Options Bar.28 Click Modify. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim.

40 Click Finish Region. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. (Rectangle). Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. 45 Using the method learned previously.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

and click OK. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F. for Name. press Tab to highlight the chain. as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 52 In the Create Group dialog. draw wide detail lines as shown. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.D. 49 Click Modify. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.. and then click to select them.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly.

select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. and use the grips to resize the masking region.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 71 Click Modify. and then click OK. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. select Leader and Free End. 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.62 Press Esc twice. 64 Press Esc twice. 72 If necessary. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click to specify the second leader point. 76 To select the leader start point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and click to specify the text insertion point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 80 Press Esc twice. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown.

90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc twice.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and click to place it. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the view title. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 . 88 In the drawing area.

select Visible. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Layers. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.rvt. select 3. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. you import a CAD detail drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . For A-----NPP. select Auto-Detect. For Import units. Click OK. click Training Files. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Click Open. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For Colors. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. for Line Weight. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.dwg. select Black and White. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view.

14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. and then press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . open P103 . 12 In the drawing area.8 Type ZF. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. select the viewport title.

366 .